diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9a5e81ae44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDCHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "CDCHost.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + CDC_Host_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in + * data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port. + */ +void CDC_Host_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (Pipe_IsINReceived()) + { + /* Check if data is in the pipe */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */ + uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe(); + uint8_t Buffer[BufferLength]; + + /* Read in the pipe data to the temporary buffer */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength); + + /* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */ + for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++) + putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]); + } + + /* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if a packet has been received */ + if (Pipe_IsINReceived()) + { + /* Discard the unused event notification */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5dcbc8e8e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CDCHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_HOST_H_ +#define _CDC_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN 1 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT 2 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE 3 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void CDC_Host_Task(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4fac1d03d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application + * for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile. + * + * This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port. + * + * Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC + * and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor + * specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force + * the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..baf02a2162 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,255 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the CDC interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */ + if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE)) + { + /* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + } + else + { + /* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */ + FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid CDC interfaces */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT); + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + + /* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + } + + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the notification pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_DATA_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared + * using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface). + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1a118cad3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "CDCHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the CDC class */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */ + #define CDC_DATA_CLASS 0x0A + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass (unused) */ + #define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS 0x00 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */ + #define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL 0x00 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoCDCInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..320951a5fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dfbefbb800 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,733 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = CDCHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..29fa60ba38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor + * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */ + if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE)) + break; + + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b58d44027a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "GenericHIDHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define HID_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0626a8a8aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ac764fad04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the GenericHIDHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "GenericHIDHost.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Generic HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + HID_Host_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report + * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port. + */ +void ReadNextReport(void) +{ + /* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived())) + { + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + uint8_t ReportINData[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Read in HID report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ReportINData, sizeof(ReportINData)); + + /* Print report data through the serial port */ + for (uint16_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < sizeof(ReportINData); CurrByte++) + printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ReportINData[CurrByte]); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Writes a report to the attached device. + * + * \param ReportOUTData Buffer containing the report to send to the device + * \param ReportIndex Index of the report in the device (zero if the device does not use multiple reports) + * \param ReportType Type of report to send, either HID_REPORTTYPE_OUTPUT or HID_REPORTTYPE_FEATURE + * \param ReportLength Length of the report to send + */ +void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength) +{ + /* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the + * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */ + if (Pipe_IsConfigured()) + { + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */ + if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady())) + { + /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* If the report index is used, send it before the report data */ + if (ReportIndex) + Pipe_Write_Byte(ReportIndex); + + /* Write out HID report data */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength); + + /* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + } + else + { + /* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetReport, + .wValue = ((ReportType << 8) | ReportIndex), + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = ReportLength, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request to the device */ + USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData); + } +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired. + */ +void HID_Host_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + ReadNextReport(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..415dae0231 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _GENERICHID_HOST_H_ +#define _GENERICHID_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */ + #define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + + /** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */ + #define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + + /** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Report type specifier, for output reports to a device */ + #define HID_REPORTTYPE_OUTPUT 0x02 + + /** HID Report type specifier, for feature reports to a device */ + #define HID_REPORTTYPE_FEATURE 0x03 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void HID_Host_Task(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ReadNextReport(void); + void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d72dda103f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Generic HID Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Generic HID host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a Generic HID USB host, for any device implementing + * the HID profile. + * + * Received reports from the attached device are printed to the serial port. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a07acb4389 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,733 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = GenericHIDHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e586ea5d35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..425f0a4bef --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "KeyboardHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3bdbc95ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..64bcf0906a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,287 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHost.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + Keyboard_HID_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report + * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port. + */ +void ReadNextReport(void) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport; + + /* Select keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + + /* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived())) + { + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in keyboard report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport)); + + /* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero (special key such as shift is being pressed) */ + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0); + + /* Check if a key has been pressed */ + if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Refreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +void Keyboard_HID_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetProtocol, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* If a report has been received, read and process it */ + ReadNextReport(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4aa09e1b7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */ + uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Keyboard_HID_Task(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ReadNextReport(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a3d5f717df --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using + * the standard keyboard HID profile. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. + * + * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6e005da0a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,733 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ee3b998f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + else + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..338adc93bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c6db18fae --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6ac1f5a65b --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor, + .wValue = (DTYPE_Report << 8), + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} + diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a141ffb8ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD 0x07 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..620f158e01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + Keyboard_HID_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +void Keyboard_HID_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (Pipe_IsINReceived()) + { + /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the keyboard report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Process the read in keyboard report from the device */ + ProcessKeyboardReport(KeyboardReport); + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} + +/** Processes a read HID report from an attached keyboard, extracting out elements via the HID parser results + * as required and prints pressed characters to the serial port. Each time a key is typed, a board LED is toggled. + * + * \param KeyboardReport Pointer to a HID report from an attached keyboard device + */ +void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport) +{ + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + /* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */ + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize == 8) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */ + bool FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */ + uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */ + if (KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + + /* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */ + break; + } + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90db94a2aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Keyboard_HID_Task(void); + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd36706739 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using + * the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports, + * allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports + * keyboards with a single HID report. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the + * report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the + * USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..393551268e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,735 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c951c797e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextMassStorageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextMassStorageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MASS_STORE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if + * another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + /* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */ + if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c0b8e6f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */ + #define MASS_STORE_CLASS 0x08 + + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */ + #define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */ + #define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL 0x50 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextMassStorageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b154575bf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..afeace02f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,691 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file + * also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks + * can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained + * to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents. + * + * \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the + * specifications and thus can prove difficult to interface with. It + * may be necessary to retry the functions in the module several times + * after they have returned and error to successfully send the command + * to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function + * timeout period extended beyond 100ms (some badly designed devices exceeding + * 1.5 seconds occasionally) by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS to a + * larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler + * via the -D switch. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C +#include "MassStoreCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** Current CBW to send to the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is not externally accessible. + */ +static CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock; + +/** Current CSW received from the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is externally accessible so that the return codes may be checked. + */ +CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + +/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented + * by the routines in this file, and is not externally accessible. + */ +static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1; + + +/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, excluding values 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF */ + if (++MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF) + MassStore_Tag = 1; + + /* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + while(!(Pipe_IsOUTReady())); + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking + * to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout; + } + + Pipe_Freeze(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_Freeze(); + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + }; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or + * writing to the nominated buffer. + * + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + uint16_t BytesRem = SCSICommandBlock.Header.DataTransferLength; + + /* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */ + if (SCSICommandBlock.Header.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN) + { + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the block data from the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Acknowledge the packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + else + { + /* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the block data to the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Acknowledge the packet */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady())); + } + + /* Freeze used pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* If an error in the command ocurred, abort */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Load in the CSW from the attached device */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Clear the data ready for next reception */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + .bRequest = REQ_ClearFeature, + .wValue = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + .wIndex = EndpointNum, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface, + * readying the device for the next CBW. + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_MassStorageReset, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical + * Unit in the attached device. + * + * \param MaxLUNIndex Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_GetMaxLUN, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 1, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled) + { + /* Clear the pipe stall */ + Pipe_ClearStall(); + + /* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */ + *MaxLUNIndex = 0; + } + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This + * gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param SensePtr Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 6 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned sense data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData((uint8_t*)SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the + * storage medium into a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to read from + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to read from the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to read + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 10 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Read + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Read + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned block data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the + * storage medium from a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to write to + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to write to in the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to write + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 10 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Write + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Write + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Write the data to the device from the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept + * other commands. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = 0, + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 6 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the + * given Logical Unit within the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param CapacityPtr Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t), + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 10 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // MSB of Logical block address + 0x00, + 0x00, + 0x00, // LSB of Logical block address + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Partial Medium Indicator + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned capacity data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Endian-correct the read data */ + CapacityPtr->Blocks = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks); + CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from + * being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still + * be issued before the first read or write command is sent. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param PreventRemoval Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + .Header = + { + .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE, + .Tag = MassStore_Tag, + .DataTransferLength = 0, + .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + .LUN = LUNIndex, + .SCSICommandLength = 6 + }, + + .SCSICommandData = + { + SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + PreventRemoval, // Prevent flag + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus())) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e939f1c869 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + #include "SCSI_Codes.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */ + #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF + + /** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */ + #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE + + /** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */ + #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL + + /** Command Static Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */ + #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7) + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7) + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 2000 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + + /* Type defines: */ + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */ + uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */ + uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */ + } Header; + + uint8_t SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */ + } CommandBlockWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transferred */ + uint8_t Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */ + } CommandStatusWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the + * device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the + * device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t ReponseCode; + + uint8_t SegmentNumber; + + unsigned char SenseKey : 4; + unsigned char _RESERVED1 : 1; + unsigned char ILI : 1; + unsigned char EOM : 1; + unsigned char FileMark : 1; + + uint8_t Information[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier; + uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode; + uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3]; + } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t; + + /** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number + * of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by + * the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */ + uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */ + } SCSI_Capacity_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */ + enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t + { + Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */ + Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */ + Phase_Error = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C) + static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void); + #endif + + uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum); + uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void); + uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b2213de21 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to + * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and + * the SENSE data. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_ +#define _SCSI_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12 + #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03 + #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00 + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25 + #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D + #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28 + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08 + #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A + + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E + + #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A + + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07 + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..354a75fc72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MassStorageHost.h" + +/* Globals */ +/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */ +uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + MassStorage_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + Buttons_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from + * the device and print them to the serial port. + */ +void MassStorage_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), false, ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */ + printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1)); + + /* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), false, ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data + * is read - both on start-up and after a failed command */ + SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData; + if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass)) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */ + if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass)) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready..")); + + /* Wait until disk ready */ + do + { + Serial_TxByte('.'); + + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_TestUnitReady(0)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Test Unit Ready"), false, ErrorCode); + break; + } + } + while ((SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass) && USB_IsConnected); + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... ")); + + /* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */ + SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity; + + /* Retrieve disk capacity */ + if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass)) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */ + printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize); + + /* Create a new buffer capabable of holding a single block from the device */ + uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize]; + + /* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */ + if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) || + (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass)) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n")); + + /* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */ + for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++) + { + /* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */ + uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4]; + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte); + } + + puts_P(PSTR(" ")); + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress board button to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n")); + + /* Wait for the board button to be pressed */ + while (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)) + { + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */ + for (uint32_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlock++) + { + /* Read in the next block of data from the device */ + if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlock, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) || + (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass)) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */ + for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++) + { + char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte]; + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Indicates that a communication error has occurred with the attached Mass Storage Device, + * printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before + * continuing. + * + * \param CommandString ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed + * \param FailedAtSCSILayer Indicates if the command failed at the (logical) SCSI layer or at the physical USB layer + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + */ +void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, bool FailedAtSCSILayer, uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + if (FailedAtSCSILayer) + { + /* Display the error code */ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "SCSI command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Status Code: %d"), ErrorCode); + } + else + { + /* Display the error code */ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d"), ErrorCode); + } + + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a299b7008f --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + #include "Lib/MassStoreCommands.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Board Buttons driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED2) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void MassStorage_Task(void); + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, bool FailedAtSCSILayer, uint8_t ErrorCode); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..88b42e9373 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Mass Storage Device
USB Subclass:Bulk Only
Relevant Standards:USBIF Mass Storage StandardUSB Bulk-Only Transport StandardSCSI Primary Commands SpecificationSCSI Block Commands Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices + * using the standard Mass Storage USB profile. + * + * The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped + * out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287 + * AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents + * of the disk will be dumped to the serial port. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..709f42f617 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,735 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MassStorageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + Lib/MassStoreCommands.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=2000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f6ab59ae1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb1ae63ade --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "MouseHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5194af3753 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9b4db30860 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,283 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHost.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + Mouse_HID_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report + * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port. + */ +void ReadNextReport(void) +{ + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport; + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Select mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + + /* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived())) + { + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in mouse report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport)); + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */ + if (MouseReport.X > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + else if (MouseReport.X < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */ + if (MouseReport.Y > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + else if (MouseReport.Y < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */ + if (MouseReport.Button) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */ + printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X, + MouseReport.Y, + MouseReport.Button); + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Refreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +void Mouse_HID_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetProtocol, + .wValue = 0, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* If a report has been received, read and process it */ + ReadNextReport(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1abd560687 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */ + int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Mouse_HID_Task(void); + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ReadNextReport(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3838a70116 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs, + * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and + * button status information. + * + * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * MouseHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67e05a63ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,732 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5d9d3f04e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + else + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08400c50fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f3f45e313c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using Mouse Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d895908e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor, + .wValue = (DTYPE_Report << 8), + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f5429f0a96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON 0x09 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL 0x01 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */ + #define USAGE_X 0x30 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */ + #define USAGE_Y 0x31 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3ef5503b3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + Mouse_HID_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +void Mouse_HID_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (Pipe_IsINReceived()) + { + /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */ + if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the mouse report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Process the read in mouse report from the device */ + ProcessMouseReport(MouseReport); + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Freeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} + +/** Processes a read HID report from an attached mouse, extracting out elements via the HID parser results + * as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs. + * + * \param MouseReport Pointer to a HID report from an attached mouse device + */ +void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + bool FoundData; + + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse button value */ + FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */ + if (ReportItem->Value) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) && + ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) || + (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y)) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse relative position value */ + FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + int16_t DeltaMovement; + + if (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize > 8) + DeltaMovement = (int16_t)ReportItem->Value; + else + DeltaMovement = (int8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */ + if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2); + } + else + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4); + } + } + } + + /* Display the button information on the board LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b91d6d1a83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Mouse_HID_Task(void); + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3c83341a27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID + * reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This + * demo supports mice with a single HID report. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs. + * On connection to a USB mouse, the report items will be processed and + * printed as a formatted list through the USART before the mouse is + * fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..30e40ad45a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,735 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1084969643 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextStillImageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the events pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == SIMAGE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the + * search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..29df30c0cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "StillImageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */ + #define SIMAGE_CLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */ + #define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */ + #define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d3a494a5f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..38755aba8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard + * documentation for more information on each PIMA command. + */ + +#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO 0x1001 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION 0x1002 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION 0x1003 + + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK 0x2001 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR 0x2002 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN 0x2003 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID 0x2004 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED 0x2005 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED 0x2006 + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f05e48f4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,279 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as + * reading and writing of stored image data. + */ + +#include "StillImageCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + +/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */ + if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if any parameters in the command block */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + } + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the events pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the event data into the global structure */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock)); + + /* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Freeze the event pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device. */ +uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout; + } + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Return error code and break out of the loop */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected; + } + }; + + /* Freeze OUT pipe after use */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Load in the response from the attached device */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the returned block type is a response block */ + if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the device has returned any parameters */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Clear pipe bank after use */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + } + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError; +} + +/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued. + * + * \param Buffer Source data buffer to send to the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to send + */ +void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the data contents to the pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Send the last packet to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received. + * + * \param Buffer Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to receive + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the data into the buffer */ + ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device. + * + * \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise + */ +bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void) +{ + bool IsEventReceived = false; + + /* Unfreeze the Event pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */ + if (Pipe_BytesInPipe()) + IsEventReceived = true; + + /* Freeze the pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return IsEventReceived; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum) +{ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + .bRequest = REQ_ClearFeature, + .wValue = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + .wIndex = EndpointNum, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ad0ba55a24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "PIMACodes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE 0x01 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 0x02 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE 0x03 + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 5000 + + /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for + * a command container. + * + * \param params Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container + */ + #define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \ + (params * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0]))) + + /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for + * a data container. + * + * \param datalen Length in bytes of the data in the container + */ + #define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + datalen) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an + * attached Still Image device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */ + uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */ + uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */ + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */ + uint32_t Params[4]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */ + } PIMA_Container_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */ + enum PIMA_Container_Types_t + { + CType_Undefined = 0, /**< Undefined container type */ + CType_CommandBlock = 1, /**< Command Block container type */ + CType_DataBlock = 2, /**< Data Block container type */ + CType_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type */ + CType_EventBlock = 4, /**< Event Block container type */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void); + uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void); + void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void); + void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void); + uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..318e257314 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "StillImageHost.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + for (;;) + { + StillImage_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE); + CLKPR = 0; + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information + * through the serial port. + */ +void StillImage_Task(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration, + .wValue = 1, + .wIndex = 0, + .wLength = 0, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control error.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), + .Type = CType_CommandBlock, + .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO, + .TransactionID = 0x00000000, + .Params = {}, + }; + + /* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Receive the response data block */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */ + uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */ + uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize]; + + /* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */ + SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize); + + /* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */ + uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo; + + /* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */ + DeviceInfoPos += 8; // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += 2; // Skip over FunctionalMode + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over OperationCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over EventCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over DevicePropCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + + /* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer); + printf_P(PSTR(" Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Manufacturer String + + /* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Model[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model); + printf_P(PSTR(" Model: %s\r\n"), Model); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Model String + + /* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion); + printf_P(PSTR(" Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion); + + /* Receive the final response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + .Type = CType_CommandBlock, + .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION, + .TransactionID = 0x00000000, + .Params = {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Receive the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + .Type = CType_CommandBlock, + .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION, + .TransactionID = 0x00000001, + .Params = {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Receive the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode + * strings which contain ASCII printable characters only. + * + * \param UnicodeString Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string + * \param Buffer Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored + */ +void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer) +{ + /* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */ + uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++); + + /* Loop through the entire unicode string */ + while (CharactersRemaining--) + { + /* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, only Unicode coded ASCII supported) */ + *(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString; + + /* Jump to the next unicode character */ + UnicodeString += 2; + } + + /* Null terminate the string */ + *Buffer = 0; +} + +/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + * \param ResponseCodeError Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure + */ +void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError) +{ + char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail")); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"), FailureType); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1896b8fe5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + #include "Lib/PIMACodes.h" + #include "Lib/StillImageCommands.h" + + #include + #include + #include + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED2) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void StillImage_Task(void); + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer); + void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError); + +#endif diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4cdfe63466 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo + * + * \section SSec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Still Image Device
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF Still Image Class SpecificationPIMA 15740 Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ * + * \section SSec_Description Project Description: + * + * Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as + * digital cameras. + * + * This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its + * information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the + * session. + * + * \section SSec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * None + *
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a4428c5656 --- /dev/null +++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,733 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# Denver Gingerich +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Input clock frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the +# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may +# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the +# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed +# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' +# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your +# source code. +# +# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the +# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU. +F_CLOCK = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = StillImageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# Path to the LUFA library +LUFA_PATH = ../../../.. + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + Lib/StillImageCommands.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) +CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY +CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf +MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) ) +FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr ) + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +checkboard: + @echo + @echo ---------- Selected Board ---------- + @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD). + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \ +begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \ +clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \ +doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee \ No newline at end of file